]> git.proxmox.com Git - mirror_ubuntu-hirsute-kernel.git/blob - include/net/mac80211.h
Merge tag 'fsnotify_for_v5.10-rc5' of git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git...
[mirror_ubuntu-hirsute-kernel.git] / include / net / mac80211.h
1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */
2 /*
3 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
4 *
5 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
6 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
7 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
8 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
9 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
10 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2020 Intel Corporation
11 */
12
13 #ifndef MAC80211_H
14 #define MAC80211_H
15
16 #include <linux/bug.h>
17 #include <linux/kernel.h>
18 #include <linux/if_ether.h>
19 #include <linux/skbuff.h>
20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h>
21 #include <net/cfg80211.h>
22 #include <net/codel.h>
23 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
24 #include <asm/unaligned.h>
25
26 /**
27 * DOC: Introduction
28 *
29 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
30 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
31 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
32 * drivers.
33 */
34
35 /**
36 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
37 *
38 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
39 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
40 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
41 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
42 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
43 * tasklet function.
44 *
45 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
46 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
47 */
48
49 /**
50 * DOC: Warning
51 *
52 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
53 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
54 */
55
56 /**
57 * DOC: Frame format
58 *
59 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
60 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
61 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
62 * hardware.
63 *
64 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
65 *
66 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
67 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
68 *
69 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
70 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
71 */
72
73 /**
74 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
75 *
76 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
77 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
78 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
79 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
80 *
81 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
82 * suspend.
83 *
84 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
85 *
86 */
87
88 /**
89 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
90 *
91 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
92 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
93 * between different stations/interfaces.
94 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
95 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
96 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
97 *
98 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
99 * driver operation.
100 *
101 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
102 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
103 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
104 *
105 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
106 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
107 *
108 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a
109 * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a
110 * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
111 *
112 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to
113 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to
114 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls
115 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using
116 * ieee80211_return_txq().
117 *
118 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
119 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
120 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
121 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
122 * .release_buffered_frames().
123 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
124 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
125 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
126 */
127
128 struct device;
129
130 /**
131 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
132 *
133 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
134 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
135 */
136 enum ieee80211_max_queues {
137 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
138 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
139 };
140
141 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
142
143 /**
144 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
145 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
146 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
147 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
148 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
149 */
150 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
151 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
152 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
153 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
154 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
155 };
156
157 /**
158 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
159 *
160 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
161 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
162 *
163 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
164 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
165 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
166 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
167 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
168 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
169 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
170 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
171 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
172 */
173 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
174 u16 txop;
175 u16 cw_min;
176 u16 cw_max;
177 u8 aifs;
178 bool acm;
179 bool uapsd;
180 bool mu_edca;
181 struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
182 };
183
184 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
185 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
186 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
187 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
188 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
189 };
190
191 /**
192 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
193 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
194 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
195 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
196 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
197 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
198 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
199 */
200 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
201 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
202 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
203 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
204 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
205 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
206 };
207
208 /**
209 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
210 *
211 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
212 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
213 *
214 * @def: the channel definition
215 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
216 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
217 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
218 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
219 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
220 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
221 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
222 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
223 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
224 */
225 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
226 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
227 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
228
229 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
230
231 bool radar_enabled;
232
233 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
234 };
235
236 /**
237 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
238 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
239 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
240 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
241 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
242 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
243 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
244 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
245 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
246 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
247 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
248 * for changes/removal.)
249 */
250 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
251 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
252 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
253 };
254
255 /**
256 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
257 *
258 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
259 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
260 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
261 * done.
262 *
263 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
264 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
265 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
266 */
267 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
268 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
269 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
270 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
271 };
272
273 /**
274 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
275 *
276 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
277 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
278 *
279 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
280 * also implies a change in the AID.
281 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
282 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
283 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
284 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
285 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
286 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
287 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
288 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
289 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
290 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
291 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
292 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
293 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
294 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
295 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
296 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
297 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
298 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
299 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
300 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
301 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
302 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
303 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
304 * changed
305 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
306 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
307 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
308 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
309 * context had been assigned.
310 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
311 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
312 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
313 * keep alive) changed.
314 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
315 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder
316 * functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
317 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed
318 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed.
319 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed
320 * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed.
321 * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
322 * status changed.
323 *
324 */
325 enum ieee80211_bss_change {
326 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
327 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
328 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
329 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
330 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
331 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
332 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
333 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
334 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
335 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
336 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
337 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
338 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
339 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
340 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
341 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
342 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
343 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
344 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
345 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
346 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
347 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
348 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
349 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23,
350 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24,
351 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25,
352 BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER = 1<<26,
353 BSS_CHANGED_TWT = 1<<27,
354 BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD = 1<<28,
355 BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR = 1<<29,
356 BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY = 1<<30,
357 BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = 1<<31,
358
359 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
360 };
361
362 /*
363 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
364 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
365 * filtering will be disabled.
366 */
367 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
368
369 /**
370 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
371 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
372 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
373 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
374 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
375 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
376 * once each time the timeout triggers.
377 */
378 enum ieee80211_event_type {
379 RSSI_EVENT,
380 MLME_EVENT,
381 BAR_RX_EVENT,
382 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
383 };
384
385 /**
386 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
387 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
388 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
389 */
390 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
391 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
392 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
393 };
394
395 /**
396 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
397 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
398 */
399 struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
400 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
401 };
402
403 /**
404 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
405 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
406 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
407 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
408 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
409 */
410 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
411 AUTH_EVENT,
412 ASSOC_EVENT,
413 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
414 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
415 };
416
417 /**
418 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
419 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
420 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
421 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
422 */
423 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
424 MLME_SUCCESS,
425 MLME_DENIED,
426 MLME_TIMEOUT,
427 };
428
429 /**
430 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
431 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
432 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
433 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
434 */
435 struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
436 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
437 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
438 u16 reason;
439 };
440
441 /**
442 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
443 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
444 * @tid: the tid
445 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
446 */
447 struct ieee80211_ba_event {
448 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
449 u16 tid;
450 u16 ssn;
451 };
452
453 /**
454 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
455 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
456 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
457 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
458 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
459 * @u:union holding the fields above
460 */
461 struct ieee80211_event {
462 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
463 union {
464 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
465 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
466 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
467 } u;
468 };
469
470 /**
471 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
472 *
473 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
474 *
475 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
476 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
477 */
478 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
479 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
480 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
481 };
482
483 /**
484 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
485 *
486 * @lci: LCI subelement content
487 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
488 * @lci_len: LCI data length
489 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
490 */
491 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
492 const u8 *lci;
493 const u8 *civicloc;
494 size_t lci_len;
495 size_t civicloc_len;
496 };
497
498 /**
499 * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from
500 * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail.
501 *
502 * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
503 * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
504 */
505 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery {
506 u32 min_interval;
507 u32 max_interval;
508 };
509
510 /**
511 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
512 *
513 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
514 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
515 *
516 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
517 * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK
518 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
519 * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
520 * ACK, BACK or both
521 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
522 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
523 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
524 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
525 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
526 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
527 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
528 * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames
529 * @assoc: association status
530 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
531 * or not
532 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
533 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
534 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
535 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
536 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
537 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
538 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
539 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
540 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
541 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
542 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
543 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
544 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
545 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
546 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
547 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
548 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
549 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
550 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
551 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
552 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
553 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
554 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
555 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
556 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
557 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
558 * the current band.
559 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
560 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
561 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
562 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
563 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
564 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
565 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
566 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
567 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
568 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
569 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
570 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
571 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
572 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
573 * relation to the newly configured threshold.
574 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
575 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single
576 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
577 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
578 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
579 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
580 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
581 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
582 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
583 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
584 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
585 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
586 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
587 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
588 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
589 * your driver/device needs to do.
590 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
591 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
592 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
593 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
594 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
595 * @txpower: TX power in dBm. INT_MIN means not configured.
596 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
597 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
598 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
599 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
600 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
601 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
602 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
603 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
604 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
605 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
606 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
607 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
608 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
609 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
610 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
611 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
612 * station.
613 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
614 * responder functionality.
615 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
616 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile
617 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP
618 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set
619 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set
620 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of
621 * nontransmitted BSSIDs
622 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received
623 * in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set.
624 * @he_oper: HE operation information of the AP we are connected to
625 * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters.
626 * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE
627 * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration
628 * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
629 * interval.
630 * @s1g: BSS is S1G BSS (affects Association Request format).
631 * @beacon_tx_rate: The configured beacon transmit rate that needs to be passed
632 * to driver when rate control is offloaded to firmware.
633 */
634 struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
635 const u8 *bssid;
636 u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
637 bool multi_sta_back_32bit;
638 bool uora_exists;
639 bool ack_enabled;
640 u8 uora_ocw_range;
641 u16 frame_time_rts_th;
642 bool he_support;
643 bool twt_requester;
644 bool twt_responder;
645 bool twt_protected;
646 /* association related data */
647 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
648 bool ibss_creator;
649 u16 aid;
650 /* erp related data */
651 bool use_cts_prot;
652 bool use_short_preamble;
653 bool use_short_slot;
654 bool enable_beacon;
655 u8 dtim_period;
656 u16 beacon_int;
657 u16 assoc_capability;
658 u64 sync_tsf;
659 u32 sync_device_ts;
660 u8 sync_dtim_count;
661 u32 basic_rates;
662 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
663 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
664 u16 ht_operation_mode;
665 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
666 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
667 s32 cqm_rssi_low;
668 s32 cqm_rssi_high;
669 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
670 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
671 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
672 int arp_addr_cnt;
673 bool qos;
674 bool idle;
675 bool ps;
676 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
677 size_t ssid_len;
678 bool hidden_ssid;
679 int txpower;
680 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
681 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
682 bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
683 u16 max_idle_period;
684 bool protected_keep_alive;
685 bool ftm_responder;
686 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
687 /* Multiple BSSID data */
688 bool nontransmitted;
689 u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN];
690 u8 bssid_index;
691 u8 bssid_indicator;
692 bool ema_ap;
693 u8 profile_periodicity;
694 struct {
695 u32 params;
696 u16 nss_set;
697 } he_oper;
698 struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd;
699 struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color;
700 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery;
701 u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval;
702 bool s1g;
703 struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask beacon_tx_rate;
704 };
705
706 /**
707 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
708 *
709 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
710 *
711 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
712 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
713 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
714 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
715 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
716 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
717 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
718 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
719 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
720 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
721 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
722 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
723 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
724 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
725 * station
726 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
727 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
728 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
729 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
730 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
731 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
732 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
733 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
734 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
735 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
736 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
737 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
738 * hardware queue.
739 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
740 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
741 * is for the whole aggregation.
742 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
743 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
744 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
745 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
746 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
747 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
748 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
749 * off-channel operation.
750 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation
751 * (header conversion)
752 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
753 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
754 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
755 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
756 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
757 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
758 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
759 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
760 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
761 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
762 * queue gets full.
763 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
764 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
765 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
766 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
767 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
768 * should kick the MLME state machine.
769 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
770 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
771 * status to user space)
772 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
773 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
774 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
775 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
776 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
777 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
778 * handled properly by the device.
779 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
780 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
781 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
782 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
783 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
784 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
785 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
786 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
787 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
788 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
789 * PS-Poll responses.
790 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
791 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
792 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
793 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
794 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
795 * monitor injection).
796 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
797 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
798 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
799 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
800 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
801 *
802 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
803 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
804 */
805 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
806 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
807 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
808 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
809 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
810 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
811 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
812 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
813 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
814 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
815 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
816 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
817 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
818 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
819 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
820 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP = BIT(14),
821 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
822 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
823 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
824 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
825 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
826 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
827 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
828 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
829 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
830 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
831 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
832 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
833 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
834 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
835 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
836 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
837 };
838
839 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
840
841 #define IEEE80211_TX_RC_S1G_MCS IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS
842
843 /**
844 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
845 *
846 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
847 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
848 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
849 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
850 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
851 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
852 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
853 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup
854 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
855 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
856 * it can be sent out.
857 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that
858 * has already been assigned to this frame.
859 *
860 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
861 */
862 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
863 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
864 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
865 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2),
866 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3),
867 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4),
868 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP = BIT(5),
869 IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(6),
870 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO = BIT(7),
871 };
872
873 /*
874 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
875 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
876 */
877 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
878 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
879 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
880 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
881 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
882 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
883 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
884 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
885
886 /**
887 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
888 * Rate Control algorithm.
889 *
890 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
891 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
892 *
893 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
894 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
895 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
896 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
897 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
898 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
899 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
900 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
901 * Greenfield mode.
902 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
903 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
904 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
905 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
906 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
907 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
908 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
909 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
910 */
911 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
912 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
913 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
914 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
915
916 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
917 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
918 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
919 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
920 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
921 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
922 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
923 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
924 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
925 };
926
927
928 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
929 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
930
931 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
932 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
933
934 /* maximum number of rate stages */
935 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
936
937 /* maximum number of rate table entries */
938 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
939
940 /**
941 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
942 *
943 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
944 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
945 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
946 *
947 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
948 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
949 *
950 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
951 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
952 *
953 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
954 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
955 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
956 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
957 * information::
958 *
959 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
960 *
961 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
962 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
963 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
964 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
965 * information should then contain::
966 *
967 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
968 *
969 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
970 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
971 */
972 struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
973 s8 idx;
974 u16 count:5,
975 flags:11;
976 } __packed;
977
978 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
979
980 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
981 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
982 {
983 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
984 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
985 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
986 }
987
988 static inline u8
989 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
990 {
991 return rate->idx & 0xF;
992 }
993
994 static inline u8
995 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
996 {
997 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
998 }
999
1000 /**
1001 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
1002 *
1003 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
1004 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
1005 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
1006 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
1007 *
1008 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
1009 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
1010 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
1011 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
1012 * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally
1013 * @control: union part for control data
1014 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try
1015 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS
1016 * @control.use_rts: use RTS
1017 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS
1018 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only)
1019 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table
1020 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients
1021 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL)
1022 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL)
1023 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags
1024 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs)
1025 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space
1026 * @pad: padding
1027 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates
1028 * @status: union part for status data
1029 * @status.rates: attempted rates
1030 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal
1031 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length
1032 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length
1033 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy)
1034 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only
1035 * used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness
1036 * @status.is_valid_ack_signal: ACK signal is valid
1037 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area
1038 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data
1039 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK
1040 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
1041 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
1042 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1043 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
1044 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1045 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
1046 */
1047 struct ieee80211_tx_info {
1048 /* common information */
1049 u32 flags;
1050 u32 band:3,
1051 ack_frame_id:13,
1052 hw_queue:4,
1053 tx_time_est:10;
1054 /* 2 free bits */
1055
1056 union {
1057 struct {
1058 union {
1059 /* rate control */
1060 struct {
1061 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
1062 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1063 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
1064 u8 use_rts:1;
1065 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
1066 u8 short_preamble:1;
1067 u8 skip_table:1;
1068 /* 2 bytes free */
1069 };
1070 /* only needed before rate control */
1071 unsigned long jiffies;
1072 };
1073 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
1074 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1075 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
1076 u32 flags;
1077 codel_time_t enqueue_time;
1078 } control;
1079 struct {
1080 u64 cookie;
1081 } ack;
1082 struct {
1083 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1084 s32 ack_signal;
1085 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
1086 u8 ampdu_len;
1087 u8 antenna;
1088 u16 tx_time;
1089 bool is_valid_ack_signal;
1090 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
1091 } status;
1092 struct {
1093 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
1094 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1095 u8 pad[4];
1096
1097 void *rate_driver_data[
1098 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1099 };
1100 void *driver_data[
1101 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1102 };
1103 };
1104
1105 static inline u16
1106 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est)
1107 {
1108 /* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime
1109 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1
1110 */
1111 info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2;
1112 return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1113 }
1114
1115 static inline u16
1116 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1117 {
1118 return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1119 }
1120
1121 /**
1122 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control
1123 *
1124 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
1125 * @info: Basic tx status information
1126 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1127 * @rate: The TX rate that was used when sending the packet
1128 * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver
1129 */
1130 struct ieee80211_tx_status {
1131 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1132 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
1133 struct sk_buff *skb;
1134 struct rate_info *rate;
1135 struct list_head *free_list;
1136 };
1137
1138 /**
1139 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
1140 *
1141 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
1142 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
1143 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
1144 *
1145 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1146 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1147 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1148 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1149 */
1150 struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
1151 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1152 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1153 const u8 *common_ies;
1154 size_t common_ie_len;
1155 };
1156
1157
1158 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1159 {
1160 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1161 }
1162
1163 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1164 {
1165 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1166 }
1167
1168 /**
1169 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1170 *
1171 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1172 *
1173 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1174 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1175 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1176 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1177 *
1178 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
1179 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
1180 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
1181 */
1182 static inline void
1183 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1184 {
1185 int i;
1186
1187 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1188 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1189 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1190 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1191 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1192 /* clear the rate counts */
1193 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1194 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1195
1196 BUILD_BUG_ON(
1197 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
1198 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1199 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1200 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1201 }
1202
1203
1204 /**
1205 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1206 *
1207 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1208 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1209 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1210 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
1211 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1212 * verification has been done by the hardware.
1213 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
1214 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1215 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1216 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1217 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1218 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1219 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1220 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1221 * de-duplication by itself.
1222 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1223 * the frame.
1224 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1225 * the frame.
1226 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1227 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1228 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1229 * merging.
1230 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1231 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1232 * (including FCS) was received.
1233 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1234 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1235 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1236 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1237 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1238 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1239 * each A-MPDU
1240 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1241 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1242 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1243 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1244 * on this subframe
1245 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1246 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1247 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1248 * done by the hardware
1249 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1250 * processing it in any regular way.
1251 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1252 * them for sniffing purposes.
1253 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1254 * monitor interfaces.
1255 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1256 * them for sniffing purposes.
1257 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1258 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1259 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1260 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1261 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1262 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1263 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1264 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1265 * interleaved with other frames.
1266 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1267 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1268 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
1269 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1270 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1271 * the first subframe.
1272 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1273 * be done in the hardware.
1274 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1275 * frame
1276 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
1277 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1278 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1279 *
1280 * - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1281 * - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1282 * - DATA3_CODING
1283 * - DATA5_GI
1284 * - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1285 * - DATA6_NSTS
1286 * - DATA3_STBC
1287 *
1288 * from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1289 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1290 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
1291 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
1292 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
1293 * the "0-length PSDU" field included there. The value for it is
1294 * in &struct ieee80211_rx_status. Note that if this value isn't
1295 * known the frame shouldn't be reported.
1296 */
1297 enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1298 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1299 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
1300 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2),
1301 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1302 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1303 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1304 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
1305 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
1306 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8),
1307 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9),
1308 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10),
1309 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11),
1310 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12),
1311 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13),
1312 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14),
1313 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(15),
1314 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(16),
1315 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(17),
1316 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18),
1317 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19),
1318 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(20),
1319 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21),
1320 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22),
1321 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23),
1322 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24),
1323 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25),
1324 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE = BIT(26),
1325 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU = BIT(27),
1326 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG = BIT(28),
1327 RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU = BIT(29),
1328 };
1329
1330 /**
1331 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
1332 *
1333 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
1334 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1335 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1336 * if the driver fills this value it should add
1337 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1338 * to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact.
1339 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1340 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
1341 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1342 */
1343 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1344 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0),
1345 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2),
1346 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3),
1347 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1348 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6),
1349 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7),
1350 };
1351
1352 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4
1353
1354 enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1355 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1356 RX_ENC_HT,
1357 RX_ENC_VHT,
1358 RX_ENC_HE,
1359 };
1360
1361 /**
1362 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1363 *
1364 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1365 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1366 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1367 *
1368 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1369 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1370 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1371 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1372 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1373 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1374 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1375 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1376 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1377 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1378 * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz.
1379 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1380 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1381 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1382 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1383 * values were filled.
1384 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1385 * support dB or unspecified units)
1386 * @antenna: antenna used
1387 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1388 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1389 * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
1390 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1391 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1392 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
1393 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
1394 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1395 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1396 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
1397 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1398 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1399 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1400 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1401 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
1402 */
1403 struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1404 u64 mactime;
1405 u64 boottime_ns;
1406 u32 device_timestamp;
1407 u32 ampdu_reference;
1408 u32 flag;
1409 u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1;
1410 u8 enc_flags;
1411 u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
1412 u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
1413 u8 rate_idx;
1414 u8 nss;
1415 u8 rx_flags;
1416 u8 band;
1417 u8 antenna;
1418 s8 signal;
1419 u8 chains;
1420 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1421 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1422 u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
1423 };
1424
1425 static inline u32
1426 ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status)
1427 {
1428 return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) +
1429 (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0);
1430 }
1431
1432 /**
1433 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1434 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1435 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1436 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1437 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1438 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1439 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1440 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1441 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1442 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1443 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1444 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1445 * @data field.
1446 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1447 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1448 * length
1449 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1450 *
1451 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1452 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1453 * data.
1454 */
1455 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1456 u32 present;
1457 u8 align;
1458 u8 oui[3];
1459 u8 subns;
1460 u8 pad;
1461 u16 len;
1462 u8 data[];
1463 } __packed;
1464
1465 /**
1466 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1467 *
1468 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1469 *
1470 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1471 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1472 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1473 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1474 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1475 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1476 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1477 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1478 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1479 * for more.
1480 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1481 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1482 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1483 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1484 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1485 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1486 * operating channel.
1487 */
1488 enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
1489 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
1490 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
1491 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
1492 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
1493 };
1494
1495
1496 /**
1497 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1498 *
1499 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
1500 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1501 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1502 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1503 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1504 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
1505 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1506 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1507 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1508 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1509 */
1510 enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1511 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
1512 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
1513 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
1514 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
1515 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1516 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1517 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
1518 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
1519 };
1520
1521 /**
1522 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1523 *
1524 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1525 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1526 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1527 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1528 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1529 */
1530 enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1531 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1532 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1533 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1534 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1535
1536 /* keep last */
1537 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1538 };
1539
1540 /**
1541 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1542 *
1543 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1544 *
1545 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1546 *
1547 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1548 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1549 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1550 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1551 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1552 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1553 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1554 *
1555 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1556 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1557 *
1558 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1559 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1560 *
1561 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1562 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1563 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1564 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1565 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1566 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
1567 *
1568 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1569 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1570 * configured for an HT channel.
1571 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1572 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1573 */
1574 struct ieee80211_conf {
1575 u32 flags;
1576 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1577
1578 u16 listen_interval;
1579 u8 ps_dtim_period;
1580
1581 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1582
1583 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1584 bool radar_enabled;
1585 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1586 };
1587
1588 /**
1589 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1590 *
1591 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1592 * operation.
1593 *
1594 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1595 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1596 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1597 * the driver passed into mac80211.
1598 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1599 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1600 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1601 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1602 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1603 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1604 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in
1605 * current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new
1606 * channel, expressed in TU.
1607 */
1608 struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1609 u64 timestamp;
1610 u32 device_timestamp;
1611 bool block_tx;
1612 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1613 u8 count;
1614 u32 delay;
1615 };
1616
1617 /**
1618 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1619 *
1620 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1621 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1622 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1623 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1624 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1625 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1626 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1627 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1628 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1629 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1630 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1631 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1632 * this is not pure P2P vif.
1633 */
1634 enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1635 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
1636 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
1637 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
1638 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3),
1639 };
1640
1641
1642 /**
1643 * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags
1644 *
1645 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled
1646 * The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211.
1647 * It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface.
1648 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload
1649 */
1650
1651 enum ieee80211_offload_flags {
1652 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED = BIT(0),
1653 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR = BIT(1),
1654 };
1655
1656 /**
1657 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1658 *
1659 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1660 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1661 *
1662 * @type: type of this virtual interface
1663 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1664 * or the BSS we're associated to
1665 * @addr: address of this interface
1666 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1667 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1668 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1669 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1670 * for read access.
1671 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
1672 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1673 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1674 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1675 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1676 * @offloaad_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface.
1677 * These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface,
1678 * .change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver
1679 * within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change
1680 * restrictions.
1681 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1682 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1683 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1684 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1685 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1686 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1687 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
1688 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1689 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1690 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1691 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1692 * interface.
1693 * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211
1694 * for this interface.
1695 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1696 * sizeof(void \*).
1697 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1698 * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped,
1699 * protected by fq->lock.
1700 * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see
1701 * &enum ieee80211_offload_flags.
1702 */
1703 struct ieee80211_vif {
1704 enum nl80211_iftype type;
1705 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1706 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1707 bool p2p;
1708 bool csa_active;
1709 bool mu_mimo_owner;
1710
1711 u8 cab_queue;
1712 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1713
1714 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1715
1716 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1717
1718 u32 driver_flags;
1719 u32 offload_flags;
1720
1721 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1722 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1723 #endif
1724
1725 bool probe_req_reg;
1726 bool rx_mcast_action_reg;
1727
1728 bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1729
1730 /* must be last */
1731 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1732 };
1733
1734 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1735 {
1736 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1737 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
1738 #endif
1739 return false;
1740 }
1741
1742 /**
1743 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1744 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1745 *
1746 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1747 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1748 *
1749 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1750 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1751 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1752 */
1753 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1754
1755 /**
1756 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1757 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1758 *
1759 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1760 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1761 *
1762 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1763 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1764 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1765 */
1766 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1767
1768 /**
1769 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1770 *
1771 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1772 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1773 *
1774 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1775 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1776 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1777 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
1778 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1779 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1780 * generation in software.
1781 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1782 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
1783 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
1784 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1785 * (MFP) to be done in software.
1786 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
1787 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
1788 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1789 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1790 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1791 * MIC.
1792 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1793 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1794 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1795 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1796 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1797 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1798 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
1799 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1800 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1801 * only for management frames (MFP).
1802 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1803 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1804 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
1805 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1806 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1807 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
1808 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation.
1809 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver
1810 * for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number
1811 * generation only
1812 */
1813 enum ieee80211_key_flags {
1814 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1815 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1816 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1817 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1818 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1819 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1820 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
1821 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
1822 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8),
1823 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX = BIT(9),
1824 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE = BIT(10),
1825 };
1826
1827 /**
1828 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1829 *
1830 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1831 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1832 *
1833 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1834 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
1835 * encrypted in hardware.
1836 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
1837 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1838 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
1839 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1840 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1841 * @keylen: key material length
1842 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1843 * data block:
1844 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1845 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1846 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
1847 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1848 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
1849 */
1850 struct ieee80211_key_conf {
1851 atomic64_t tx_pn;
1852 u32 cipher;
1853 u8 icv_len;
1854 u8 iv_len;
1855 u8 hw_key_idx;
1856 s8 keyidx;
1857 u16 flags;
1858 u8 keylen;
1859 u8 key[];
1860 };
1861
1862 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16
1863
1864 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1865 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1866
1867 /**
1868 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1869 *
1870 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1871 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1872 * reverse order than in packet)
1873 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1874 * reverse order than in packet)
1875 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1876 * reverse order than in packet)
1877 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1878 * reverse order than in packet)
1879 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
1880 */
1881 struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1882 union {
1883 struct {
1884 u32 iv32;
1885 u16 iv16;
1886 } tkip;
1887 struct {
1888 u8 pn[6];
1889 } ccmp;
1890 struct {
1891 u8 pn[6];
1892 } aes_cmac;
1893 struct {
1894 u8 pn[6];
1895 } aes_gmac;
1896 struct {
1897 u8 pn[6];
1898 } gcmp;
1899 struct {
1900 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1901 u8 seq_len;
1902 } hw;
1903 };
1904 };
1905
1906 /**
1907 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1908 *
1909 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1910 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1911 *
1912 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1913 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1914 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1915 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1916 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1917 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1918 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1919 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1920 * key_idx value calculation:
1921 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1922 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1923 */
1924 struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1925 u32 cipher;
1926 u16 iftype;
1927 u8 hdr_len;
1928 u8 pn_len;
1929 u8 pn_off;
1930 u8 key_idx_off;
1931 u8 key_idx_mask;
1932 u8 key_idx_shift;
1933 u8 mic_len;
1934 };
1935
1936 /**
1937 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1938 *
1939 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1940 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1941 *
1942 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1943 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1944 */
1945 enum set_key_cmd {
1946 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
1947 };
1948
1949 /**
1950 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1951 *
1952 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1953 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1954 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1955 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1956 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1957 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1958 */
1959 enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1960 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1961 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1962 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1963 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1964 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1965 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1966 };
1967
1968 /**
1969 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1970 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1971 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1972 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1973 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1974 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1975 *
1976 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1977 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1978 */
1979 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1980 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1981 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1982 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1983 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1984 };
1985
1986 /**
1987 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1988 *
1989 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
1990 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
1991 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1992 */
1993 struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1994 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1995 struct {
1996 s8 idx;
1997 u8 count;
1998 u8 count_cts;
1999 u8 count_rts;
2000 u16 flags;
2001 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
2002 };
2003
2004 /**
2005 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration
2006 *
2007 * Used to configure txpower for station.
2008 *
2009 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames
2010 * to the STA.
2011 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power
2012 * will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC
2013 * %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power.
2014 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for
2015 * per peer TPC.
2016 */
2017 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr {
2018 s16 power;
2019 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type;
2020 };
2021
2022 /**
2023 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
2024 *
2025 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
2026 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
2027 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
2028 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
2029 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
2030 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
2031 *
2032 * @addr: MAC address
2033 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
2034 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
2035 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2036 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2037 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
2038 * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities
2039 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
2040 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
2041 * Can be modified by driver.
2042 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
2043 * otherwise always false)
2044 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
2045 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
2046 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
2047 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
2048 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
2049 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
2050 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
2051 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
2052 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
2053 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
2054 * the station moves to associated state.
2055 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
2056 * @rates: rate control selection table
2057 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
2058 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
2059 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
2060 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
2061 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
2062 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
2063 * unlimited.
2064 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
2065 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
2066 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
2067 * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration
2068 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
2069 * the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
2070 */
2071 struct ieee80211_sta {
2072 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
2073 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
2074 u16 aid;
2075 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
2076 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
2077 struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
2078 struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa;
2079 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2080 bool wme;
2081 u8 uapsd_queues;
2082 u8 max_sp;
2083 u8 rx_nss;
2084 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
2085 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
2086 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
2087 bool tdls;
2088 bool tdls_initiator;
2089 bool mfp;
2090 u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
2091
2092 /**
2093 * @max_amsdu_len:
2094 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
2095 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
2096 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
2097 *
2098 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
2099 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
2100 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal
2101 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
2102 *
2103 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
2104 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
2105 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
2106 */
2107 u16 max_amsdu_len;
2108 bool support_p2p_ps;
2109 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
2110 u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
2111 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr;
2112
2113 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
2114
2115 /* must be last */
2116 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2117 };
2118
2119 /**
2120 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
2121 *
2122 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2123 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
2124 *
2125 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
2126 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
2127 */
2128 enum sta_notify_cmd {
2129 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
2130 };
2131
2132 /**
2133 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
2134 *
2135 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
2136 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
2137 */
2138 struct ieee80211_tx_control {
2139 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2140 };
2141
2142 /**
2143 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
2144 *
2145 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
2146 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
2147 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
2148 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
2149 * @ac: the AC for this queue
2150 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
2151 *
2152 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
2153 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
2154 */
2155 struct ieee80211_txq {
2156 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
2157 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2158 u8 tid;
2159 u8 ac;
2160
2161 /* must be last */
2162 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2163 };
2164
2165 /**
2166 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
2167 *
2168 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
2169 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
2170 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
2171 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
2172 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
2173 *
2174 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
2175 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
2176 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
2177 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
2178 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
2179 * algorithm.
2180 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
2181 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
2182 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
2183 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
2184 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
2185 * CCK frames.
2186 *
2187 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
2188 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
2189 * the FCS at the end.
2190 *
2191 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
2192 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
2193 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
2194 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
2195 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
2196 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
2197 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
2198 *
2199 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
2200 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
2201 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
2202 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
2203 *
2204 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
2205 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
2206 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
2207 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
2208 *
2209 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
2210 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
2211 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
2212 *
2213 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
2214 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
2215 *
2216 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
2217 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
2218 *
2219 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
2220 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
2221 * stack support for dynamic PS.
2222 *
2223 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2224 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
2225 *
2226 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2227 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
2228 *
2229 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2230 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2231 * the stack.
2232 *
2233 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
2234 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2235 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
2236 *
2237 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2238 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2239 * dtim_period).
2240 *
2241 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2242 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2243 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2244 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2245 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2246 * only in that case.
2247 *
2248 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2249 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2250 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2251 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2252 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2253 * the PS mode of connected stations.
2254 *
2255 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2256 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2257 * software.
2258 *
2259 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2260 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2261 * active interfaces.
2262 *
2263 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2264 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2265 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2266 *
2267 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2268 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2269 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2270 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2271 * supported cipher suites.
2272 *
2273 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2274 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2275 * for frames.
2276 *
2277 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2278 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2279 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2280 * control for more details.
2281 *
2282 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2283 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2284 *
2285 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2286 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2287 * is supported.
2288 *
2289 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2290 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
2291 *
2292 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2293 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2294 * using aggregation for such frames.)
2295 *
2296 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2297 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2298 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2299 * CSA frame.
2300 *
2301 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2302 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2303 *
2304 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
2305 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
2306 *
2307 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2308 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2309 *
2310 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2311 * within A-MPDU.
2312 *
2313 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2314 * for sent beacons.
2315 *
2316 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2317 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2318 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2319 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2320 *
2321 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2322 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2323 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2324 * timeout.
2325 *
2326 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2327 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2328 *
2329 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2330 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2331 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2332 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2333 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2334 *
2335 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2336 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2337 *
2338 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2339 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2340 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2341 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2342 *
2343 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2344 * The stack will not do fragmentation.
2345 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2346 *
2347 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2348 * TDLS links.
2349 *
2350 * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2351 * mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2352 * deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2353 * beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2354 * virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2355 * the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2356 * deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2357 *
2358 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2359 * support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
2360 *
2361 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2362 * course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2363 *
2364 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2365 * extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2366 * the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2367 * but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2368 * See also the documentation for that flag.
2369 *
2370 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
2371 * MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
2372 * TXQs to start with.
2373 *
2374 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU
2375 * length in tx status information
2376 *
2377 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2378 *
2379 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2380 * only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set.
2381 *
2382 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only
2383 * aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx
2384 * A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID.
2385 *
2386 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation
2387 * offload
2388 *
2389 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2390 */
2391 enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2392 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2393 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2394 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2395 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2396 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2397 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2398 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2399 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2400 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2401 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2402 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2403 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2404 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2405 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2406 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2407 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2408 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2409 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2410 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2411 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2412 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2413 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2414 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2415 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2416 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2417 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2418 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2419 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2420 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2421 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2422 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2423 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2424 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2425 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2426 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
2427 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2428 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2429 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2430 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2431 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
2432 IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
2433 IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
2434 IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
2435 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
2436 IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
2437 IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN,
2438 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID,
2439 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID,
2440 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT,
2441 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD,
2442
2443 /* keep last, obviously */
2444 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2445 };
2446
2447 /**
2448 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2449 *
2450 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2451 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2452 *
2453 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2454 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2455 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2456 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2457 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2458 *
2459 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2460 *
2461 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2462 * along with this structure.
2463 *
2464 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2465 *
2466 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2467 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2468 *
2469 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2470 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2471 *
2472 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2473 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2474 *
2475 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2476 * that HW supports
2477 *
2478 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
2479 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2480 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2481 *
2482 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2483 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2484 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2485 *
2486 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2487 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2488 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2489 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2490 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2491 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2492 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2493 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2494 *
2495 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2496 * can handle.
2497 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2498 * the hw can report back.
2499 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2500 *
2501 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2502 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2503 * aggregation.
2504 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2505 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2506 * it shouldn't be set.
2507 *
2508 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2509 * aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2510 * advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2511 * the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2512 * with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2513 * For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
2514 *
2515 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2516 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2517 *
2518 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2519 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2520 *
2521 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2522 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2523 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2524 * adding _BW is supported today.
2525 *
2526 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2527 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2528 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2529 *
2530 * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2531 *
2532 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2533 * @units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp
2534 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2535 * device_timestamp.
2536 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a
2537 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2538 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value.
2539 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the
2540 * radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set.
2541 *
2542 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2543 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2544 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2545 *
2546 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2547 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2548 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2549 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2550 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2551 * neither enabled.
2552 *
2553 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2554 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2555 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2556 *
2557 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2558 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2559 * supported by HW.
2560 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2561 * device.
2562 *
2563 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
2564 * them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
2565 * unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
2566 *
2567 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while
2568 * refilling deficit of each TXQ.
2569 *
2570 * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set.
2571 */
2572 struct ieee80211_hw {
2573 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2574 struct wiphy *wiphy;
2575 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2576 void *priv;
2577 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2578 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2579 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2580 int vif_data_size;
2581 int sta_data_size;
2582 int chanctx_data_size;
2583 int txq_data_size;
2584 u16 queues;
2585 u16 max_listen_interval;
2586 s8 max_signal;
2587 u8 max_rates;
2588 u8 max_report_rates;
2589 u8 max_rate_tries;
2590 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2591 u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
2592 u8 max_tx_fragments;
2593 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
2594 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
2595 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
2596 struct {
2597 int units_pos;
2598 s16 accuracy;
2599 } radiotap_timestamp;
2600 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
2601 u8 uapsd_queues;
2602 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
2603 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2604 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
2605 u8 max_nan_de_entries;
2606 u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
2607 u8 weight_multiplier;
2608 u32 max_mtu;
2609 };
2610
2611 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2612 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2613 {
2614 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2615 }
2616 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2617
2618 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2619 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2620 {
2621 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2622 }
2623 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2624
2625 /**
2626 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2627 *
2628 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2629 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2630 */
2631 struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2632 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2633
2634 /* Keep last */
2635 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2636 };
2637
2638 /**
2639 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2640 *
2641 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2642 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2643 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2644 * @status: channel-switch response status
2645 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2646 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2647 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2648 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2649 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2650 */
2651 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2652 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2653 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2654 u8 action_code;
2655 u32 status;
2656 u32 timestamp;
2657 u16 switch_time;
2658 u16 switch_timeout;
2659 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2660 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2661 };
2662
2663 /**
2664 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2665 *
2666 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2667 *
2668 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2669 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2670 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2671 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2672 * is already used internally by mac80211.
2673 *
2674 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
2675 */
2676 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2677
2678 /**
2679 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2680 *
2681 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2682 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2683 */
2684 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2685 {
2686 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2687 }
2688
2689 /**
2690 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
2691 *
2692 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2693 * @addr: the address to set
2694 */
2695 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
2696 {
2697 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2698 }
2699
2700 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2701 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2702 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2703 {
2704 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
2705 return NULL;
2706 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
2707 }
2708
2709 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2710 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2711 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2712 {
2713 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
2714 return NULL;
2715 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
2716 }
2717
2718 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2719 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2720 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
2721 {
2722 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
2723 return NULL;
2724 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
2725 }
2726
2727 /**
2728 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2729 * @hw: the hardware
2730 * @skb: the skb
2731 *
2732 * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure
2733 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2734 */
2735 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2736
2737 /**
2738 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
2739 *
2740 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2741 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2742 *
2743 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2744 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
2745 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2746 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2747 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
2748 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2749 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2750 *
2751 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2752 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2753 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2754 *
2755 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2756 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2757 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2758 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2759 *
2760 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2761 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2762 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2763 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2764 *
2765 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2766 *
2767 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2768 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2769 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2770 * based on the receive flags.
2771 *
2772 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2773 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2774 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2775 * keys.
2776 *
2777 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2778 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2779 * handler.
2780 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
2781 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
2782 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2783 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
2784 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
2785 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
2786 *
2787 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2788 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2789 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
2790 *
2791 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
2792 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following
2793 * requirements:
2794 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to
2795 mac80211 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been
2796 completed when also setting @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV for any key,
2797 2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
2798 at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
2799 3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
2800 encrypted with the new key and
2801 4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
2802 Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
2803 */
2804
2805 /**
2806 * DOC: Powersave support
2807 *
2808 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2809 *
2810 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2811 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2812 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2813 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2814 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2815 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2816 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2817 * it finds traffic directed to it.
2818 *
2819 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2820 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2821 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
2822 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2823 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
2824 *
2825 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2826 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2827 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
2828 *
2829 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2830 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2831 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2832 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
2833 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2834 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
2835 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
2836 *
2837 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2838 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2839 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2840 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2841 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2842 * periods.
2843 *
2844 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
2845 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2846 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2847 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2848 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2849 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2850 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2851 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2852 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2853 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2854 *
2855 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
2856 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
2857 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
2858 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2859 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2860 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2861 *
2862 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2863 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
2864 */
2865
2866 /**
2867 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2868 *
2869 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
2870 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
2871 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2872 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2873 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2874 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2875 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2876 *
2877 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2878 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
2879 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2880 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2881 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2882 *
2883 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2884 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2885 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2886 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2887 *
2888 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2889 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2890 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2891 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2892 *
2893 * - a list of information element IDs
2894 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2895 *
2896 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2897 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2898 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2899 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2900 * vendor information elements.
2901 *
2902 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2903 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2904 *
2905 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2906 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2907 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2908 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2909 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2910 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2911 *
2912 *
2913 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2914 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2915 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2916 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2917 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2918 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2919 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2920 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2921 *
2922 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2923 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2924 * signal strength threshold checking.
2925 */
2926
2927 /**
2928 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2929 *
2930 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2931 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2932 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2933 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2934 *
2935 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2936 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2937 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2938 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2939 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2940 * hardware flags.
2941 *
2942 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2943 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2944 * turned off otherwise.
2945 *
2946 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2947 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2948 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2949 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2950 */
2951
2952 /**
2953 * DOC: Frame filtering
2954 *
2955 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2956 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2957 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2958 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2959 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2960 *
2961 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2962 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2963 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2964 *
2965 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2966 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2967 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2968 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2969 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2970 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2971 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
2972 *
2973 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2974 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2975 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2976 * or dropped.
2977 *
2978 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2979 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2980 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2981 * the flag, but not clear it.
2982 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2983 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2984 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2985 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2986 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2987 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2988 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2989 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
2990 */
2991
2992 /**
2993 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2994 *
2995 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2996 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2997 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2998 *
2999 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
3000 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
3001 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
3002 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
3003 * the driver code.
3004 *
3005 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
3006 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
3007 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
3008 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
3009 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
3010 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
3011 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
3012 *
3013 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
3014 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
3015 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
3016 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
3017 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
3018 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
3019 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
3020 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
3021 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
3022 * @sta_notify callback.
3023 *
3024 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
3025 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
3026 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
3027 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
3028 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
3029 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
3030 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
3031 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
3032 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
3033 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
3034 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
3035 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
3036 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
3037 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
3038 *
3039 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
3040 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
3041 *
3042 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
3043 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
3044 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
3045 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
3046 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
3047 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
3048 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
3049 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
3050 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
3051 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
3052 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
3053 *
3054 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
3055 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
3056 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
3057 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
3058 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
3059 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
3060 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
3061 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
3062 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
3063 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
3064 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
3065 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
3066 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
3067 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
3068 *
3069 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
3070 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
3071 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
3072 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
3073 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
3074 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
3075 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
3076 *
3077 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
3078 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
3079 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
3080 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
3081 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
3082 *
3083 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
3084 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
3085 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
3086 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
3087 */
3088
3089 /**
3090 * DOC: HW queue control
3091 *
3092 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
3093 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
3094 * was problematic for a few reasons:
3095 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
3096 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
3097 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
3098 *
3099 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
3100 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
3101 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
3102 *
3103 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
3104 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
3105 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
3106 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
3107 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
3108 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
3109 * the hardware queue.
3110 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
3111 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
3112 *
3113 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
3114 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
3115 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
3116 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
3117 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
3118 *
3119 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
3120 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
3121 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
3122 * off-channel queue: 9
3123 *
3124 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
3125 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
3126 *
3127 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
3128 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
3129 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
3130 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
3131 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
3132 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3133 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
3134 *
3135 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
3136 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
3137 *
3138 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3139 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
3140 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
3141 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
3142 */
3143
3144 /**
3145 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
3146 *
3147 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
3148 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
3149 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
3150 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
3151 *
3152 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
3153 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
3154 * multicast address.
3155 *
3156 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
3157 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
3158 *
3159 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
3160 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
3161 *
3162 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
3163 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
3164 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
3165 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
3166 * honour this flag if possible.
3167 *
3168 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
3169 * station
3170 *
3171 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
3172 *
3173 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
3174 *
3175 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
3176 *
3177 * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames
3178 */
3179 enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
3180 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
3181 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
3182 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
3183 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
3184 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
3185 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
3186 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
3187 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
3188 FIF_MCAST_ACTION = 1<<9,
3189 };
3190
3191 /**
3192 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
3193 *
3194 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
3195 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
3196 *
3197 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
3198 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
3199 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
3200 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
3201 *
3202 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
3203 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
3204 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either
3205 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or
3206 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status
3207 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after
3208 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special
3209 * status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE.
3210 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
3211 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
3212 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
3213 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
3214 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
3215 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
3216 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
3217 * session is gone and removes the station.
3218 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
3219 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
3220 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
3221 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
3222 */
3223 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
3224 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
3225 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
3226 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
3227 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
3228 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
3229 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
3230 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
3231 };
3232
3233 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1
3234 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2
3235
3236 /**
3237 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
3238 *
3239 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3240 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
3241 * @tid: tid of the BA session
3242 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
3243 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
3244 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
3245 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the
3246 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
3247 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3248 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
3249 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3250 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
3251 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
3252 */
3253 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
3254 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
3255 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3256 u16 tid;
3257 u16 ssn;
3258 u16 buf_size;
3259 bool amsdu;
3260 u16 timeout;
3261 };
3262
3263 /**
3264 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
3265 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
3266 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
3267 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
3268 */
3269 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
3270 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
3271 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
3272 };
3273
3274 /**
3275 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
3276 *
3277 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
3278 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
3279 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
3280 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
3281 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
3282 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
3283 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
3284 * the peer.
3285 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
3286 * by the peer
3287 */
3288 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3289 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
3290 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
3291 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
3292 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
3293 };
3294
3295 /**
3296 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3297 *
3298 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3299 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3300 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa).
3301 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3302 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3303 *
3304 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3305 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3306 * for sending management frames offchannel.
3307 */
3308 enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3309 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3310 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3311 };
3312
3313 /**
3314 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_type - reconfig type
3315 *
3316 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3317 * reconfiguration type was completed.
3318 *
3319 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3320 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3321 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3322 * of wowlan configuration)
3323 */
3324 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3325 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3326 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3327 };
3328
3329 /**
3330 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3331 *
3332 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3333 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3334 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3335 *
3336 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3337 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3338 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
3339 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
3340 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
3341 * Must be atomic.
3342 *
3343 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3344 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3345 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3346 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3347 * or zero.
3348 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3349 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3350 * is added.
3351 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3352 *
3353 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3354 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3355 * it must turn off frame reception.)
3356 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
3357 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3358 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
3359 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3360 *
3361 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3362 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3363 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3364 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3365 * reconfigured at resume time.
3366 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3367 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3368 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3369 * must return 1 from this function.
3370 *
3371 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3372 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3373 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3374 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3375 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3376 *
3377 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3378 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3379 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3380 * in suspend().
3381 *
3382 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
3383 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
3384 * and @stop must be implemented.
3385 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3386 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3387 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
3388 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3389 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
3390 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3391 *
3392 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3393 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3394 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3395 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3396 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3397 *
3398 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3399 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3400 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
3401 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3402 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3403 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3404 * MAC address of the device going away.
3405 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3406 *
3407 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3408 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3409 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3410 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
3411 *
3412 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3413 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3414 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3415 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3416 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3417 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3418 * can sleep.
3419 *
3420 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3421 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3422 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3423 *
3424 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3425 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3426 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3427 *
3428 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3429 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3430 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3431 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3432 * which flags are changed.
3433 * This callback can sleep.
3434 *
3435 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3436 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3437 *
3438 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3439 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
3440 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3441 * is enabled.
3442 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3443 * The callback can sleep.
3444 *
3445 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3446 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3447 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3448 * The callback must be atomic.
3449 *
3450 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3451 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3452 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3453 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3454 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3455 *
3456 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3457 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3458 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3459 *
3460 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3461 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3462 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3463 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3464 * that power save is disabled.
3465 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3466 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3467 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3468 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3469 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3470 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3471 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3472 * This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
3473 * this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
3474 * software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
3475 * capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
3476 * advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
3477 * The callback can sleep.
3478 *
3479 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3480 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3481 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3482 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
3483 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3484 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3485 * The callback can sleep.
3486 *
3487 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3488 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
3489 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3490 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3491 *
3492 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3493 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3494 *
3495 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3496 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3497 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3498 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3499 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3500 *
3501 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3502 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3503 * this notification.
3504 * The callback can sleep.
3505 *
3506 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3507 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
3508 * The callback can sleep.
3509 *
3510 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3511 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3512 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3513 * The callback must be atomic.
3514 *
3515 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3516 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3517 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3518 * should be set as well.
3519 * The callback can sleep.
3520 *
3521 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3522 * The callback can sleep.
3523 *
3524 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3525 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3526 *
3527 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3528 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3529 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3530 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3531 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3532 * This callback can sleep.
3533 *
3534 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3535 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3536 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3537 * callback can sleep.
3538 *
3539 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3540 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3541 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3542 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
3543 *
3544 * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx
3545 * power for the station.
3546 * This callback can sleep.
3547 *
3548 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3549 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3550 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3551 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
3552 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3553 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3554 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3555 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3556 * The callback can sleep.
3557 *
3558 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3559 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3560 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3561 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3562 * in @sta_state.
3563 * The callback can sleep.
3564 *
3565 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3566 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3567 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3568 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3569 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3570 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3571 * Must be atomic.
3572 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3573 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3574 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
3575 *
3576 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3577 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3578 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3579 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3580 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3581 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3582 * The callback can sleep.
3583 *
3584 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
3585 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
3586 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
3587 * The callback can sleep.
3588 *
3589 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
3590 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
3591 * required function.
3592 * The callback can sleep.
3593 *
3594 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
3595 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
3596 * required function.
3597 * The callback can sleep.
3598 *
3599 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3600 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3601 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3602 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3603 * The callback can sleep.
3604 *
3605 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3606 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3607 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3608 * TSF synchronization.
3609 * The callback can sleep.
3610 *
3611 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3612 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3613 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
3614 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
3615 * The callback can sleep.
3616 *
3617 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3618 *
3619 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3620 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3621 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
3622 * The callback can sleep.
3623 *
3624 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3625 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
3626 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3627 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3628 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
3629 *
3630 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3631 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
3632 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
3633 *
3634 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
3635 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3636 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3637 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3638 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
3639 * Note that vif can be NULL.
3640 * The callback can sleep.
3641 *
3642 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3643 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3644 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3645 * completion of the channel switch.
3646 *
3647 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3648 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3649 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3650 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3651 *
3652 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
3653 *
3654 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3655 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3656 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3657 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3658 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3659 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
3660 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
3661 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3662 * must be accepted in this case.
3663 * This callback may sleep.
3664 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3665 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
3666 *
3667 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3668 *
3669 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
3670 *
3671 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3672 * queues before entering power save.
3673 *
3674 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3675 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3676 * The callback can sleep.
3677 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3678 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
3679 * The callback must be atomic.
3680 *
3681 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3682 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3683 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3684 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
3685 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
3686 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3687 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3688 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3689 * more-data bit must always be set.
3690 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3691 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
3692 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3693 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3694 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3695 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3696 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3697 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
3698 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3699 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3700 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
3701 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3702 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
3703 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
3704 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
3705 * This callback must be atomic.
3706 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3707 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3708 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
3709 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
3710 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3711 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3712 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3713 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
3714 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
3715 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
3716 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3717 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3718 * This callback must be atomic.
3719 *
3720 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3721 *
3722 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3723 *
3724 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3725 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3726 *
3727 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3728 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3729 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3730 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3731 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3732 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3733 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3734 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3735 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3736 * For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
3737 * would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
3738 * frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
3739 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3740 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3741 * If duration is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the driver the
3742 * duration for which the operation is requested.
3743 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
3744 *
3745 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3746 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3747 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3748 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3749 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3750 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3751 * 2 * (DTIM period).
3752 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
3753 *
3754 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
3755 * This callback may sleep.
3756 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
3757 * This callback may sleep.
3758 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3759 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3760 * channel context with different settings
3761 * This callback may sleep.
3762 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3763 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
3764 * This callback may sleep.
3765 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3766 * unbound from vif.
3767 * This callback may sleep.
3768 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3769 * another, as specified in the list of
3770 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3771 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
3772 * This callback may sleep.
3773 *
3774 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3775 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3776 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3777 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3778 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3779 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3780 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
3781 *
3782 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3783 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3784 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3785 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3786 * This callback may sleep.
3787 *
3788 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3789 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3790 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
3791 *
3792 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3793 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3794 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
3795 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
3796 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3797 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
3798 * 1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been
3799 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
3800 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3801 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
3802 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3803 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3804 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3805 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
3806 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3807 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3808 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3809 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3810 * when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the
3811 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3812 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called
3813 * when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with
3814 * CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count.
3815 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3816 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3817 * channel context is bound before this is called.
3818 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
3819 *
3820 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3821 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3822 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
3823 *
3824 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3825 * and hardware limits.
3826 *
3827 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3828 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3829 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3830 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3831 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3832 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3833 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3834 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3835 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
3836 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3837 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3838 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3839 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3840 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
3841 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3842 * the function call.
3843 *
3844 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
3845 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3846 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3847 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3848 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
3849 *
3850 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3851 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
3852 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3853 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3854 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3855 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3856 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3857 * changed parameters.
3858 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3859 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3860 * this call.
3861 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3862 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3863 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
3864 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
3865 * aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
3866 * between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
3867 * skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
3868 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
3869 * Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
3870 *
3871 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
3872 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
3873 * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep.
3874 * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer.
3875 * This callback may sleep.
3876 * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags
3877 * This callback may sleep.
3878 * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using
3879 * 4-address mode
3880 */
3881 struct ieee80211_ops {
3882 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3883 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3884 struct sk_buff *skb);
3885 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3886 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3887 #ifdef CONFIG_PM
3888 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3889 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3890 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
3891 #endif
3892 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3893 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3894 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3895 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3896 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
3897 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3898 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3899 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
3900 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3901 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3902 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3903 u32 changed);
3904
3905 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3906 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3907
3908 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3909 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
3910 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3911 unsigned int changed_flags,
3912 unsigned int *total_flags,
3913 u64 multicast);
3914 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3915 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3916 unsigned int filter_flags,
3917 unsigned int changed_flags);
3918 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3919 bool set);
3920 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
3921 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3922 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
3923 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3924 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3925 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3926 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3927 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
3928 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3929 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3930 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
3931 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3932 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
3933 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3934 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
3935 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3936 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3937 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3938 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3939 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
3940 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
3941 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3942 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3943 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3944 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3945 const u8 *mac_addr);
3946 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3947 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3948 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3949 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
3950 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3951 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3952 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3953 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3954 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3955 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3956 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3957 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3958 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3959 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3960 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3961 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3962 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3963 struct dentry *dir);
3964 #endif
3965 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3966 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3967 int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3968 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3969 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3970 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3971 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3972 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3973 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
3974 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3975 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3976 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3977 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3978 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3979 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3980 u32 changed);
3981 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3982 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3983 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3984 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3985 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3986 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3987 struct station_info *sinfo);
3988 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3989 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
3990 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
3991 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3992 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3993 u64 tsf);
3994 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3995 s64 offset);
3996 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3997 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3998
3999 /**
4000 * @ampdu_action:
4001 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
4002 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
4003 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
4004 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
4005 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
4006 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
4007 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
4008 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
4009 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
4010 *
4011 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
4012 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1)
4013 * - ``TX: 8..1...``
4014 *
4015 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
4016 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
4017 *
4018 * - ``TX: 1 or``
4019 * - ``TX: 18 or``
4020 * - ``TX: 81``
4021 *
4022 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
4023 *
4024 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return
4025 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START
4026 * if the session can start immediately.
4027 *
4028 * The callback can sleep.
4029 */
4030 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4031 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4032 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
4033 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
4034 struct survey_info *survey);
4035 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4036 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
4037 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
4038 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4039 void *data, int len);
4040 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
4041 struct netlink_callback *cb,
4042 void *data, int len);
4043 #endif
4044 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4045 u32 queues, bool drop);
4046 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4047 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4048 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4049 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
4050 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
4051
4052 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4053 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4054 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
4055 int duration,
4056 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
4057 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4058 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4059 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
4060 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4061 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
4062 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4063 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4064 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
4065 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4066 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4067 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
4068
4069 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4070 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4071 u16 tids, int num_frames,
4072 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4073 bool more_data);
4074 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4075 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4076 u16 tids, int num_frames,
4077 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4078 bool more_data);
4079
4080 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4081 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
4082 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4083 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4084 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
4085 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4086 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4087 u32 sset, u8 *data);
4088
4089 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4090 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4091 u16 duration);
4092
4093 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4094 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4095
4096 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4097 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4098 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4099 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4100 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4101 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
4102 u32 changed);
4103 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4104 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4105 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4106 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4107 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4108 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4109 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4110 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
4111 int n_vifs,
4112 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
4113
4114 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4115 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
4116
4117 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
4118 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4119 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4120 struct inet6_dev *idev);
4121 #endif
4122 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4123 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4124 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4125 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4126 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4127 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4128
4129 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4130 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4131 void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4132 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4133 void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4134 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4135 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4136
4137 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4138 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4139 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4140 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4141 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4142 int *dbm);
4143
4144 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4145 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4146 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
4147 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
4148 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
4149 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4150 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4151 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4152 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4153 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4154 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
4155
4156 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4157 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
4158 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4159
4160 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4161 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4162 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
4163 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4164 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4165 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4166 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4167 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
4168 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4169 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4170 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
4171 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4172 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4173 u8 instance_id);
4174 bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4175 struct sk_buff *head,
4176 struct sk_buff *skb);
4177 int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4178 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4179 struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
4180 int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4181 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4182 void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4183 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4184 int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4185 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4186 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4187 struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf);
4188 int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4189 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4190 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids);
4191 void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4192 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4193 void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4194 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled);
4195 };
4196
4197 /**
4198 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
4199 *
4200 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4201 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4202 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4203 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4204 * @priv_data_len.
4205 *
4206 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4207 * @ops: callbacks for this device
4208 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
4209 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
4210 *
4211 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4212 */
4213 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
4214 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
4215 const char *requested_name);
4216
4217 /**
4218 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
4219 *
4220 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4221 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4222 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4223 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4224 * @priv_data_len.
4225 *
4226 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4227 * @ops: callbacks for this device
4228 *
4229 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4230 */
4231 static inline
4232 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
4233 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
4234 {
4235 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
4236 }
4237
4238 /**
4239 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
4240 *
4241 * You must call this function before any other functions in
4242 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
4243 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
4244 *
4245 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4246 *
4247 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
4248 */
4249 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4250
4251 /**
4252 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
4253 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
4254 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
4255 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
4256 */
4257 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
4258 int throughput;
4259 int blink_time;
4260 };
4261
4262 /**
4263 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
4264 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
4265 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
4266 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
4267 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
4268 */
4269 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
4270 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
4271 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
4272 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
4273 };
4274
4275 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4276 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4277 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4278 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4279 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4280 const char *
4281 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4282 unsigned int flags,
4283 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4284 unsigned int blink_table_len);
4285 #endif
4286 /**
4287 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
4288 *
4289 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4290 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4291 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4292 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4293 *
4294 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4295 *
4296 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4297 */
4298 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4299 {
4300 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4301 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
4302 #else
4303 return NULL;
4304 #endif
4305 }
4306
4307 /**
4308 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
4309 *
4310 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4311 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4312 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4313 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4314 *
4315 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4316 *
4317 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4318 */
4319 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4320 {
4321 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4322 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
4323 #else
4324 return NULL;
4325 #endif
4326 }
4327
4328 /**
4329 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
4330 *
4331 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4332 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4333 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4334 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4335 *
4336 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4337 *
4338 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4339 */
4340 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4341 {
4342 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4343 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
4344 #else
4345 return NULL;
4346 #endif
4347 }
4348
4349 /**
4350 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4351 *
4352 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4353 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4354 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4355 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4356 *
4357 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4358 *
4359 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4360 */
4361 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4362 {
4363 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4364 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4365 #else
4366 return NULL;
4367 #endif
4368 }
4369
4370 /**
4371 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4372 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
4373 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
4374 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4375 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4376 *
4377 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4378 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4379 *
4380 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
4381 */
4382 static inline const char *
4383 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
4384 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4385 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4386 {
4387 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4388 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
4389 blink_table_len);
4390 #else
4391 return NULL;
4392 #endif
4393 }
4394
4395 /**
4396 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4397 *
4398 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4399 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4400 *
4401 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4402 */
4403 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4404
4405 /**
4406 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4407 *
4408 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4409 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
4410 * before calling this function.
4411 *
4412 * @hw: the hardware to free
4413 */
4414 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4415
4416 /**
4417 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4418 *
4419 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4420 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4421 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4422 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4423 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4424 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4425 *
4426 * @hw: the hardware to restart
4427 */
4428 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4429
4430 /**
4431 * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list
4432 *
4433 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4434 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4435 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4436 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4437 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4438 *
4439 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4440 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4441 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4442 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4443 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4444 *
4445 * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock
4446 *
4447 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4448 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4449 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4450 * @list: the destination list
4451 */
4452 void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4453 struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list);
4454
4455 /**
4456 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
4457 *
4458 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4459 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4460 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4461 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4462 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4463 *
4464 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4465 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4466 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4467 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4468 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4469 *
4470 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4471 *
4472 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4473 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4474 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4475 * @napi: the NAPI context
4476 */
4477 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4478 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
4479
4480 /**
4481 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4482 *
4483 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4484 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4485 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4486 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4487 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4488 *
4489 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4490 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4491 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4492 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4493 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4494 *
4495 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
4496 *
4497 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4498 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4499 */
4500 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4501 {
4502 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
4503 }
4504
4505 /**
4506 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4507 *
4508 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
4509 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4510 *
4511 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
4512 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4513 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4514 *
4515 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4516 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4517 */
4518 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
4519
4520 /**
4521 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4522 *
4523 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4524 * (internally disables bottom halves).
4525 *
4526 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
4527 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4528 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4529 *
4530 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4531 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4532 */
4533 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4534 struct sk_buff *skb)
4535 {
4536 local_bh_disable();
4537 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4538 local_bh_enable();
4539 }
4540
4541 /**
4542 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4543 *
4544 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4545 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4546 * entering/leaving PS mode.
4547 *
4548 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4549 *
4550 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4551 * each other.
4552 *
4553 * @sta: currently connected sta
4554 * @start: start or stop PS
4555 *
4556 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
4557 */
4558 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4559
4560 /**
4561 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4562 * (in process context)
4563 *
4564 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4565 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4566 * applies.
4567 *
4568 * @sta: currently connected sta
4569 * @start: start or stop PS
4570 *
4571 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
4572 */
4573 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4574 bool start)
4575 {
4576 int ret;
4577
4578 local_bh_disable();
4579 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4580 local_bh_enable();
4581
4582 return ret;
4583 }
4584
4585 /**
4586 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4587 * @sta: currently connected station
4588 *
4589 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4590 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4591 * connected station was received.
4592 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4593 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4594 * be serialized.
4595 */
4596 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4597
4598 /**
4599 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4600 * @sta: currently connected station
4601 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4602 *
4603 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4604 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4605 * from a connected station was received.
4606 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4607 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4608 * serialized.
4609 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4610 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4611 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4612 * checks.
4613 */
4614 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4615
4616 /*
4617 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4618 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4619 */
4620 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4)
4621
4622 /**
4623 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
4624 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
4625 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4626 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
4627 *
4628 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
4629 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4630 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
4631 *
4632 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4633 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4634 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4635 * call! Beware of the locking!)
4636 *
4637 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4638 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4639 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4640 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4641 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4642 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4643 *
4644 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4645 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4646 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4647 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4648 * use this API.
4649 */
4650 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4651 u8 tid, bool buffered);
4652
4653 /**
4654 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4655 *
4656 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4657 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4658 * rate selection table for the station entry.
4659 *
4660 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4661 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4662 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4663 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4664 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4665 */
4666 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4667 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4668 struct sk_buff *skb,
4669 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4670 int max_rates);
4671
4672 /**
4673 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4674 *
4675 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4676 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
4677 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
4678 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
4679 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
4680 * slow stations to starve).
4681 *
4682 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
4683 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
4684 */
4685 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4686 u32 thr);
4687
4688 /**
4689 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
4690 *
4691 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
4692 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
4693 * in updating the tx rate in data path.
4694 *
4695 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4696 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
4697 * @info: tx status information
4698 */
4699 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4700 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4701 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4702
4703 /**
4704 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4705 *
4706 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4707 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4708 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4709 *
4710 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4711 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
4712 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
4713 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4714 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
4715 *
4716 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4717 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4718 */
4719 void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4720 struct sk_buff *skb);
4721
4722 /**
4723 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
4724 *
4725 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4726 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
4727 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
4728 *
4729 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4730 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4731 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4732 *
4733 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4734 * @status: tx status information
4735 */
4736 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4737 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
4738
4739 /**
4740 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4741 *
4742 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4743 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4744 * specific skbs.
4745 *
4746 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4747 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4748 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4749 *
4750 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4751 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4752 * (NULL for multicast packets)
4753 * @info: tx status information
4754 */
4755 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4756 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4757 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
4758 {
4759 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
4760 .sta = sta,
4761 .info = info,
4762 };
4763
4764 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
4765 }
4766
4767 /**
4768 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4769 *
4770 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4771 *
4772 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4773 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4774 * for a single hardware.
4775 *
4776 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4777 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4778 */
4779 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4780 struct sk_buff *skb)
4781 {
4782 local_bh_disable();
4783 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4784 local_bh_enable();
4785 }
4786
4787 /**
4788 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
4789 *
4790 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4791 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4792 *
4793 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4794 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4795 *
4796 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4797 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4798 */
4799 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4800 struct sk_buff *skb);
4801
4802 /**
4803 * ieee80211_tx_status_8023 - transmit status callback for 802.3 frame format
4804 *
4805 * Call this function for all transmitted data frames after their transmit
4806 * completion. This callback should only be called for data frames which
4807 * are using driver's (or hardware's) offload capability of encap/decap
4808 * 802.11 frames.
4809 *
4810 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4811 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other and all
4812 * calls in the same tx status family.
4813 *
4814 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4815 * @vif: the interface for which the frame was transmitted
4816 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4817 */
4818 void ieee80211_tx_status_8023(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4819 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4820 struct sk_buff *skb);
4821
4822 /**
4823 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4824 *
4825 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4826 * connected STA.
4827 *
4828 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4829 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4830 */
4831 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4832
4833 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4834
4835 /**
4836 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4837 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4838 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
4839 * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4840 * to countdown counters. This array can contain zero values which
4841 * should be ignored.
4842 */
4843 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4844 u16 tim_offset;
4845 u16 tim_length;
4846
4847 u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM];
4848 };
4849
4850 /**
4851 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4852 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4853 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4854 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4855 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4856 *
4857 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4858 * obtain the beacon template.
4859 *
4860 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4861 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
4862 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4863 * applicable, the CSA count.
4864 *
4865 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4866 *
4867 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4868 */
4869 struct sk_buff *
4870 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4871 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4872 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4873
4874 /**
4875 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4876 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4877 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4878 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4879 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4880 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4881 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
4882 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4883 *
4884 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4885 * obtain the beacon frame.
4886 *
4887 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4888 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
4889 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4890 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
4891 *
4892 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4893 *
4894 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4895 */
4896 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4897 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4898 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4899
4900 /**
4901 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4902 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4903 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4904 *
4905 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4906 *
4907 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4908 */
4909 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4910 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4911 {
4912 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4913 }
4914
4915 /**
4916 * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown
4917 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4918 *
4919 * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4920 * This function is called implicitly when
4921 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4922 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4923 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown.
4924 *
4925 * Return: new countdown value
4926 */
4927 u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4928
4929 /**
4930 * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown
4931 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4932 * @counter: the new value for the counter
4933 *
4934 * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be
4935 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
4936 *
4937 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(),
4938 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
4939 */
4940 void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
4941
4942 /**
4943 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4944 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4945 *
4946 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
4947 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
4948 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4949 */
4950 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4951
4952 /**
4953 * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1
4954 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4955 *
4956 * This function returns whether the countdown reached zero.
4957 */
4958 bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4959
4960 /**
4961 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4962 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4963 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4964 *
4965 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4966 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4967 *
4968 * Can only be called in AP mode.
4969 *
4970 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
4971 */
4972 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4973 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4974
4975 /**
4976 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4977 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4978 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4979 *
4980 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4981 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4982 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4983 *
4984 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4985 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
4986 *
4987 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
4988 */
4989 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4990 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4991
4992 /**
4993 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4994 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4995 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4996 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
4997 * if at all possible
4998 *
4999 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
5000 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
5001 * BSSID and address is used.
5002 *
5003 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
5004 * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
5005 *
5006 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
5007 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
5008 *
5009 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
5010 */
5011 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5012 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5013 bool qos_ok);
5014
5015 /**
5016 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5017 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5018 * @src_addr: source MAC address
5019 * @ssid: SSID buffer
5020 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
5021 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
5022 *
5023 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5024 * hardware.
5025 *
5026 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5027 */
5028 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5029 const u8 *src_addr,
5030 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
5031 size_t tailroom);
5032
5033 /**
5034 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
5035 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5036 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5037 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5038 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5039 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5040 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
5041 *
5042 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5043 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5044 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5045 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
5046 */
5047 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5048 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5049 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5050 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
5051
5052 /**
5053 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
5054 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5055 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5056 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5057 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5058 *
5059 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5060 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5061 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5062 *
5063 * Return: The duration.
5064 */
5065 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5066 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
5067 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5068
5069 /**
5070 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
5071 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5072 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5073 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5074 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5075 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5076 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
5077 *
5078 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5079 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5080 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5081 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
5082 */
5083 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5084 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5085 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5086 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5087 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
5088
5089 /**
5090 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
5091 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5092 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5093 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5094 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5095 *
5096 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5097 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5098 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5099 *
5100 * Return: The duration.
5101 */
5102 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5103 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5104 size_t frame_len,
5105 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5106
5107 /**
5108 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
5109 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5110 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5111 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
5112 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
5113 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
5114 *
5115 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
5116 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
5117 *
5118 * Return: The duration.
5119 */
5120 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5121 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5122 enum nl80211_band band,
5123 size_t frame_len,
5124 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
5125
5126 /**
5127 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
5128 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5129 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5130 *
5131 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
5132 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
5133 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
5134 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
5135 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
5136 *
5137 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
5138 * frames are available.
5139 *
5140 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
5141 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
5142 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
5143 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
5144 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
5145 * use common code for all beacons.
5146 */
5147 struct sk_buff *
5148 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5149
5150 /**
5151 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
5152 *
5153 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
5154 *
5155 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5156 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5157 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5158 */
5159 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5160 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5161
5162 /**
5163 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
5164 *
5165 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
5166 * from the given packet.
5167 *
5168 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5169 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
5170 * with this P1K
5171 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5172 */
5173 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5174 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
5175 {
5176 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
5177 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
5178 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
5179
5180 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
5181 }
5182
5183 /**
5184 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
5185 *
5186 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
5187 * and transmitter address.
5188 *
5189 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5190 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
5191 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5192 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5193 */
5194 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5195 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5196
5197 /**
5198 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
5199 *
5200 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
5201 * in the packet.
5202 *
5203 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5204 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
5205 * encrypted with this key
5206 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
5207 */
5208 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5209 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
5210
5211 /**
5212 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
5213 *
5214 * @pos: start of crypto header
5215 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5216 * @pn: PN to add
5217 *
5218 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
5219 * the packet payload)
5220 *
5221 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
5222 * point to the crypto header)
5223 */
5224 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
5225
5226 /**
5227 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
5228 *
5229 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5230 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5231 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5232 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5233 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
5234 *
5235 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
5236 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
5237 * by the device and not by mac80211.
5238 *
5239 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5240 * can be done concurrently.
5241 */
5242 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5243 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5244
5245 /**
5246 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
5247 *
5248 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5249 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5250 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5251 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5252 * @seq: new sequence data
5253 *
5254 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
5255 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
5256 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
5257 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
5258 *
5259 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5260 * can be done concurrently.
5261 */
5262 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5263 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5264
5265 /**
5266 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
5267 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5268 *
5269 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
5270 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
5271 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
5272 *
5273 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
5274 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
5275 */
5276 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5277
5278 /**
5279 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
5280 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
5281 * @keyconf: new key data
5282 *
5283 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
5284 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
5285 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
5286 *
5287 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
5288 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
5289 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
5290 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
5291 *
5292 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
5293 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
5294 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
5295 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
5296 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
5297 * of the reconfiguration.
5298 *
5299 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
5300 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
5301 *
5302 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
5303 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
5304 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
5305 * the key that's being replaced.
5306 */
5307 struct ieee80211_key_conf *
5308 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5309 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5310
5311 /**
5312 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
5313 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
5314 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
5315 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
5316 * @gfp: allocation flags
5317 */
5318 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
5319 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
5320
5321 /**
5322 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
5323 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5324 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5325 *
5326 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5327 */
5328 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5329
5330 /**
5331 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
5332 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5333 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5334 *
5335 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5336 */
5337 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5338
5339 /**
5340 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
5341 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5342 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5343 *
5344 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5345 *
5346 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
5347 */
5348
5349 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5350
5351 /**
5352 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
5353 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5354 *
5355 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5356 */
5357 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5358
5359 /**
5360 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
5361 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5362 *
5363 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5364 */
5365 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5366
5367 /**
5368 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
5369 *
5370 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
5371 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
5372 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
5373 * any context, including hardirq context.
5374 *
5375 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
5376 * @info: information about the completed scan
5377 */
5378 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5379 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
5380
5381 /**
5382 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
5383 *
5384 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
5385 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
5386 *
5387 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5388 */
5389 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5390
5391 /**
5392 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
5393 *
5394 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
5395 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
5396 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
5397 * while associating, for instance.
5398 *
5399 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5400 */
5401 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5402
5403 /**
5404 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
5405 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
5406 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
5407 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
5408 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
5409 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5410 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
5411 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5412 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
5413 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER: Skip any interfaces where SDATA
5414 * is not in the driver. This may fix crashes during firmware recovery
5415 * for instance.
5416 */
5417 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
5418 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
5419 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
5420 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
5421 IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER = BIT(2),
5422 };
5423
5424 /**
5425 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5426 *
5427 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5428 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5429 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5430 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5431 *
5432 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5433 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5434 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5435 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5436 */
5437 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5438 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5439 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5440 void *data);
5441
5442 /**
5443 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
5444 *
5445 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5446 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5447 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5448 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
5449 * be used.
5450 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5451 *
5452 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5453 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5454 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5455 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5456 */
5457 static inline void
5458 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5459 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5460 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5461 void *data)
5462 {
5463 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
5464 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
5465 iterator, data);
5466 }
5467
5468 /**
5469 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
5470 *
5471 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5472 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5473 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5474 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
5475 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5476 *
5477 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5478 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5479 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5480 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5481 */
5482 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5483 u32 iter_flags,
5484 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5485 u8 *mac,
5486 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5487 void *data);
5488
5489 /**
5490 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
5491 *
5492 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5493 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5494 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
5495 *
5496 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5497 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5498 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5499 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5500 */
5501 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5502 u32 iter_flags,
5503 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5504 u8 *mac,
5505 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5506 void *data);
5507
5508 /**
5509 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5510 *
5511 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5512 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5513 * function for them.
5514 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5515 *
5516 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5517 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5518 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5519 */
5520 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5521 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5522 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5523 void *data);
5524 /**
5525 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5526 *
5527 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5528 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5529 *
5530 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5531 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5532 */
5533 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5534
5535 /**
5536 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5537 *
5538 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5539 * workqueue.
5540 *
5541 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5542 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5543 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5544 */
5545 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5546 struct delayed_work *dwork,
5547 unsigned long delay);
5548
5549 /**
5550 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
5551 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
5552 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5553 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
5554 *
5555 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
5556 *
5557 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5558 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5559 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5560 */
5561 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5562 u16 timeout);
5563
5564 /**
5565 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
5566 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5567 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5568 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5569 *
5570 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5571 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5572 * from any context.
5573 */
5574 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5575 u16 tid);
5576
5577 /**
5578 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
5579 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
5580 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
5581 *
5582 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
5583 *
5584 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5585 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5586 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5587 */
5588 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
5589
5590 /**
5591 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
5592 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5593 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5594 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5595 *
5596 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5597 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5598 * can be called from any context.
5599 */
5600 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5601 u16 tid);
5602
5603 /**
5604 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5605 *
5606 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
5607 * @addr: station's address
5608 *
5609 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5610 *
5611 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5612 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5613 */
5614 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5615 const u8 *addr);
5616
5617 /**
5618 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
5619 *
5620 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5621 * @addr: remote station's address
5622 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
5623 *
5624 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5625 *
5626 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5627 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5628 *
5629 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5630 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5631 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5632 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5633 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5634 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5635 * is not reliable.
5636 *
5637 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
5638 */
5639 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5640 const u8 *addr,
5641 const u8 *localaddr);
5642
5643 /**
5644 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5645 * @hw: the hardware
5646 * @pubsta: the station
5647 * @block: whether to block or unblock
5648 *
5649 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5650 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5651 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5652 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5653 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5654 *
5655 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5656 * manner.
5657 *
5658 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5659 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5660 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5661 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5662 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5663 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5664 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5665 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5666 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5667 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5668 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5669 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5670 * woke up while blocked or not.
5671 */
5672 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5673 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5674
5675 /**
5676 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5677 * @pubsta: the station
5678 *
5679 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5680 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5681 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5682 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5683 *
5684 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5685 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5686 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5687 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5688 *
5689 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5690 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5691 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5692 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
5693 */
5694 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
5695
5696 /**
5697 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5698 * @pubsta: the station
5699 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5700 *
5701 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5702 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5703 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5704 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5705 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5706 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5707 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5708 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5709 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5710 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5711 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5712 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5713 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5714 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5715 */
5716 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5717
5718 /**
5719 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid
5720 *
5721 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call
5722 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of
5723 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule
5724 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness.
5725 *
5726 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent
5727 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not
5728 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the
5729 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame
5730 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission
5731 * attempts.
5732 *
5733 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or
5734 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available.
5735 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of
5736 * them to 0.
5737 *
5738 * @pubsta: the station
5739 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for
5740 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec)
5741 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec)
5742 */
5743 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5744 u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime);
5745
5746 /**
5747 * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device
5748 *
5749 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5750 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5751 *
5752 * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can
5753 * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false.
5754 */
5755 bool
5756 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
5757
5758 /**
5759 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5760 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5761 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5762 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5763 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5764 *
5765 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5766 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5767 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5768 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5769 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5770 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
5771 *
5772 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5773 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5774 * set_key callback.
5775 */
5776 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5777 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5778 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5779 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5780 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5781 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5782 void *data),
5783 void *iter_data);
5784
5785 /**
5786 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5787 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5788 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5789 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5790 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5791 *
5792 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5793 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5794 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5795 * in removal process will be skipped.
5796 *
5797 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5798 * and thus iter must be atomic.
5799 */
5800 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5801 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5802 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5803 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5804 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5805 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5806 void *data),
5807 void *iter_data);
5808
5809 /**
5810 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5811 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5812 * @iter: iterator function
5813 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5814 *
5815 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5816 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5817 * places while calling into the driver.
5818 *
5819 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5820 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5821 * removed.
5822 *
5823 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5824 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5825 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5826 * or not.
5827 */
5828 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5829 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5830 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5831 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5832 void *data),
5833 void *iter_data);
5834
5835 /**
5836 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5837 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5838 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5839 *
5840 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5841 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5842 * information. This function must only be called from within the
5843 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5844 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
5845 * %NULL.
5846 *
5847 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5848 */
5849 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5850 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5851
5852 /**
5853 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5854 *
5855 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5856 *
5857 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
5858 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
5859 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5860 */
5861 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5862
5863 /**
5864 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5865 *
5866 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5867 *
5868 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
5869 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5870 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
5871 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5872 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
5873 *
5874 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5875 * without connection recovery attempts.
5876 */
5877 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5878
5879 /**
5880 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5881 *
5882 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5883 *
5884 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5885 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5886 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5887 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5888 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5889 *
5890 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5891 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5892 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5893 * disconnect normally later.
5894 *
5895 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5896 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5897 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5898 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5899 */
5900 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5901
5902 /**
5903 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5904 * rssi threshold triggered
5905 *
5906 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5907 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
5908 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
5909 * @gfp: context flags
5910 *
5911 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
5912 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5913 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5914 */
5915 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5916 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
5917 s32 rssi_level,
5918 gfp_t gfp);
5919
5920 /**
5921 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5922 *
5923 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5924 * @gfp: context flags
5925 */
5926 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5927
5928 /**
5929 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5930 *
5931 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5932 */
5933 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5934
5935 /**
5936 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5937 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5938 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5939 *
5940 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5941 * and wake up the suspended queues.
5942 */
5943 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5944
5945 /**
5946 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5947 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5948 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
5949 *
5950 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5951 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5952 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5953 */
5954 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5955 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5956
5957 /**
5958 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5959 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5960 */
5961 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5962
5963 /**
5964 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5965 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5966 */
5967 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5968
5969 /**
5970 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5971 *
5972 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5973 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5974 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5975 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5976 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5977 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5978 *
5979 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5980 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5981 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5982 */
5983 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5984 const u8 *addr);
5985
5986 /**
5987 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
5988 * @pubsta: station struct
5989 * @tid: the session's TID
5990 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
5991 * assumed to be out of the window after the call
5992 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
5993 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
5994 *
5995 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
5996 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
5997 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
5998 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
5999 */
6000 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
6001 u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
6002 u16 received_mpdus);
6003
6004 /**
6005 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
6006 *
6007 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
6008 * buffer.
6009 *
6010 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6011 * @ra: the peer's destination address
6012 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
6013 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
6014 */
6015 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
6016
6017 /**
6018 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
6019 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6020 * @addr: station mac address
6021 * @tid: the rx tid
6022 */
6023 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
6024 unsigned int tid);
6025
6026 /**
6027 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
6028 *
6029 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6030 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6031 * reordering.
6032 *
6033 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6034 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
6035 *
6036 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6037 * @addr: station mac address
6038 * @tid: the rx tid
6039 */
6040 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6041 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6042 {
6043 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6044 return;
6045 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
6046 }
6047
6048 /**
6049 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
6050 *
6051 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6052 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6053 * reordering.
6054 *
6055 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6056 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
6057 *
6058 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6059 * @addr: station mac address
6060 * @tid: the rx tid
6061 */
6062 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6063 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6064 {
6065 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6066 return;
6067 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
6068 }
6069
6070 /**
6071 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
6072 *
6073 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
6074 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
6075 *
6076 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
6077 *
6078 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6079 * @addr: station mac address
6080 * @tid: the rx tid
6081 */
6082 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6083 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
6084
6085 /* Rate control API */
6086
6087 /**
6088 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
6089 *
6090 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
6091 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
6092 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
6093 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
6094 * to be filled in
6095 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
6096 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
6097 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
6098 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
6099 * RTS threshold
6100 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
6101 * if the selected rate supports it
6102 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
6103 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
6104 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
6105 */
6106 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
6107 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
6108 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
6109 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
6110 struct sk_buff *skb;
6111 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
6112 bool rts, short_preamble;
6113 u32 rate_idx_mask;
6114 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
6115 bool bss;
6116 };
6117
6118 /**
6119 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
6120 */
6121 enum rate_control_capabilities {
6122 /**
6123 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
6124 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
6125 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
6126 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
6127 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
6128 */
6129 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
6130 };
6131
6132 struct rate_control_ops {
6133 unsigned long capa;
6134 const char *name;
6135 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6136 void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv,
6137 struct dentry *debugfsdir);
6138 void (*free)(void *priv);
6139
6140 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
6141 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6142 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6143 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
6144 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6145 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6146 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6147 u32 changed);
6148 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6149 void *priv_sta);
6150
6151 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
6152 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6153 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
6154 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6155 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6156 struct sk_buff *skb);
6157 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6158 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
6159
6160 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
6161 struct dentry *dir);
6162
6163 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
6164 };
6165
6166 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6167 enum nl80211_band band,
6168 int index)
6169 {
6170 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
6171 }
6172
6173 static inline s8
6174 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6175 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6176 {
6177 int i;
6178
6179 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6180 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6181 return i;
6182
6183 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
6184 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
6185
6186 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
6187 return 0;
6188 }
6189
6190 static inline
6191 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6192 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6193 {
6194 unsigned int i;
6195
6196 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6197 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6198 return true;
6199 return false;
6200 }
6201
6202 /**
6203 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
6204 *
6205 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
6206 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
6207 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
6208 * the most recent rate control module decision.
6209 *
6210 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6211 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
6212 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
6213 */
6214 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6215 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
6216 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
6217
6218 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6219 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6220
6221 static inline bool
6222 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6223 {
6224 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
6225 }
6226
6227 static inline bool
6228 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6229 {
6230 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6231 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6232 }
6233
6234 static inline bool
6235 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6236 {
6237 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6238 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6239 }
6240
6241 static inline bool
6242 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6243 {
6244 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
6245 }
6246
6247 static inline bool
6248 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6249 {
6250 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
6251 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
6252 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
6253 }
6254
6255 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6256 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
6257 {
6258 if (p2p) {
6259 switch (type) {
6260 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
6261 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
6262 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
6263 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
6264 default:
6265 break;
6266 }
6267 }
6268 return type;
6269 }
6270
6271 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6272 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
6273 {
6274 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
6275 }
6276
6277 /**
6278 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
6279 *
6280 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6281 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
6282 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
6283 *
6284 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
6285 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
6286 * matching GroupId management frame.
6287 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
6288 */
6289 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6290 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
6291
6292 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6293 int rssi_min_thold,
6294 int rssi_max_thold);
6295
6296 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6297
6298 /**
6299 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
6300 *
6301 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6302 *
6303 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
6304 *
6305 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
6306 * applicable.
6307 */
6308 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6309
6310 /**
6311 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
6312 * @vif: virtual interface
6313 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
6314 * @gfp: allocation flags
6315 *
6316 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
6317 */
6318 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6319 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
6320 gfp_t gfp);
6321
6322 /**
6323 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
6324 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6325 * @vif: virtual interface
6326 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
6327 * @band: the band to transmit on
6328 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
6329 *
6330 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
6331 */
6332 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6333 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
6334 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
6335
6336 /**
6337 * ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap - Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header
6338 * of injected frames
6339 * @skb: packet injected by userspace
6340 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
6341 */
6342 bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb,
6343 struct net_device *dev);
6344
6345 /**
6346 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
6347 *
6348 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
6349 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
6350 *
6351 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
6352 *
6353 * private:
6354 *
6355 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
6356 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
6357 */
6358 struct ieee80211_noa_data {
6359 u32 next_tsf;
6360 bool has_next_tsf;
6361
6362 u8 absent;
6363
6364 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6365 struct {
6366 u32 start;
6367 u32 duration;
6368 u32 interval;
6369 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6370 };
6371
6372 /**
6373 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
6374 *
6375 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
6376 * @data: NoA tracking data
6377 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6378 *
6379 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
6380 */
6381 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
6382 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6383
6384 /**
6385 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
6386 *
6387 * @data: NoA tracking data
6388 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6389 */
6390 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6391
6392 /**
6393 * ieee80211_tdls_oper_request - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
6394 * @vif: virtual interface
6395 * @peer: the peer's destination address
6396 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
6397 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
6398 * @gfp: allocation flags
6399 *
6400 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
6401 */
6402 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
6403 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
6404 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
6405
6406 /**
6407 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
6408 *
6409 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
6410 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
6411 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
6412 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
6413 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
6414 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
6415 *
6416 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
6417 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
6418 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6419 *
6420 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
6421 * @tid: the TID to reserve
6422 *
6423 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
6424 */
6425 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6426
6427 /**
6428 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
6429 *
6430 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
6431 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
6432 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
6433 *
6434 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
6435 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
6436 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6437 *
6438 * @sta: the station
6439 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
6440 */
6441 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6442
6443 /**
6444 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6445 *
6446 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6447 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6448 * ieee80211_next_txq()
6449 *
6450 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
6451 *
6452 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
6453 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
6454 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the
6455 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
6456 * but for the duration of the frame handling.
6457 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
6458 * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
6459 *
6460 * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called.
6461 * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead.
6462 */
6463 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6464 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6465
6466 /**
6467 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6468 * (in process context)
6469 *
6470 * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context
6471 * (internally disables bottom halves).
6472 *
6473 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6474 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6475 * ieee80211_next_txq()
6476 */
6477 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6478 struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6479 {
6480 struct sk_buff *skb;
6481
6482 local_bh_disable();
6483 skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq);
6484 local_bh_enable();
6485
6486 return skb;
6487 }
6488
6489 /**
6490 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from
6491 *
6492 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6493 * @ac: AC number to return packets from.
6494 *
6495 * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq
6496 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the
6497 * driver has finished scheduling it.
6498 */
6499 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6500
6501 /**
6502 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs
6503 *
6504 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6505 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
6506 *
6507 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq().
6508 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently.
6509 */
6510 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6511
6512 /* (deprecated) */
6513 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
6514 {
6515 }
6516
6517 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6518 struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force);
6519
6520 /**
6521 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission
6522 *
6523 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6524 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6525 *
6526 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled,
6527 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered.
6528 *
6529 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for
6530 * this TXQ internally.
6531 */
6532 static inline void
6533 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6534 {
6535 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true);
6536 }
6537
6538 /**
6539 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq()
6540 *
6541 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6542 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6543 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets.
6544 *
6545 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ
6546 * internally.
6547 */
6548 static inline void
6549 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6550 bool force)
6551 {
6552 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force);
6553 }
6554
6555 /**
6556 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit
6557 *
6558 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by
6559 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime
6560 * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by
6561 * next_txq().
6562 *
6563 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to
6564 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have
6565 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will
6566 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit
6567 * again.
6568 *
6569 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be
6570 * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates
6571 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry
6572 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this
6573 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets
6574 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq().
6575 *
6576 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6577 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6578 */
6579 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6580 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6581
6582 /**
6583 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
6584 *
6585 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
6586 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
6587 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
6588 *
6589 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6590 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
6591 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
6592 */
6593 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6594 unsigned long *frame_cnt,
6595 unsigned long *byte_cnt);
6596
6597 /**
6598 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
6599 *
6600 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
6601 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6602 *
6603 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6604 * @inst_id: the local instance id
6605 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
6606 * @gfp: allocation flags
6607 */
6608 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6609 u8 inst_id,
6610 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
6611 gfp_t gfp);
6612
6613 /**
6614 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
6615 *
6616 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
6617 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
6618 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6619 *
6620 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6621 * @match: match event information
6622 * @gfp: allocation flags
6623 */
6624 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6625 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
6626 gfp_t gfp);
6627
6628 /**
6629 * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX.
6630 *
6631 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
6632 * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length.
6633 *
6634 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6635 * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate
6636 * information.
6637 * @len: frame length in bytes
6638 */
6639 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6640 struct ieee80211_rx_status *status,
6641 int len);
6642
6643 /**
6644 * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX.
6645 *
6646 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
6647 * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length.
6648 *
6649 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6650 * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
6651 * @len: frame length in bytes
6652 */
6653 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6654 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info,
6655 int len);
6656 /**
6657 * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading.
6658 *
6659 * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3
6660 * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the
6661 * hardware or firmware.
6662 *
6663 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6664 * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off
6665 */
6666 bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable);
6667
6668 /**
6669 * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template.
6670 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6671 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6672 *
6673 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
6674 *
6675 * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error.
6676 */
6677 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6678 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6679
6680 /**
6681 * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast
6682 * probe response template.
6683 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6684 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6685 *
6686 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
6687 *
6688 * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error.
6689 */
6690 struct sk_buff *
6691 ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6692 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6693 #endif /* MAC80211_H */